Home

2011 Durango Owner`s Manual

1. electrical system failure Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description y 5 P ty 5 P Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M37 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Red Controller Red Stability Control Sys M33 10 Amp Powertrain tem Module Red Controller Stoplamp Switch Transmission Control Sensor ler M38 25 Amp All Door Lock amp Un M34 10 Amp Park Assist Module Natural _ lock Red Climate Control Sys tem Module IR CAUTION PE a as e When installing the totally integrated power mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is MS x cu EE Beer Reha properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the totally ee ee Power Outlet integrated power module and possibly result in a Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 Or disconnect the negative cable fro
2. 0004 340 Remote 2223444 3d le EGO EP S ides 29 Starting and Operating 04 336 Starting Procedures 336 Steering POW E 224 5255 224 4005000004 Ries 362 364 Tilt Column socso tiss cee ae eee istaa 160 Wheel Heated 0 0 0 0 eee 162 Wheel Tilt 22 4084 ac n Ro 160 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 316 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls iex d ee PR Rae one YE aA 316 DLOTARE uos us 9 eu ded ag aes bb Sea ade A 517 Storage Vehicle sse ced Reb a8 329 517 Storing Your Vehicle lille 517 Suni ROOF uendere RR ACTA RR RU UU 212 Sun Visor Extension 0 00002 eee 111 Sunglasses Storage 570 INDEX ae Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 67 Sway Control Trailer o mamiss a nia giore as 373 Synthetic Engine Oll sc esitis rere RES 483 System Remote Starting asaan aunan aan 29 Tachometer seg eraa Erant Rr er ee S 244 Telescoping Steering Column 160 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 319 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 252 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 86 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 0 0 0 000 e eee 227 Tilt Steering Column 2 0 0 000000 160 Tire and Loading Information Placard 383 Tire Identification Number TIN 381 Tire Markings 4 sues RR HERE RR RES 378 Tire Safety Information 06 378 jp eess 100 387 551 Air Pressure s
3. 358 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 360 Hil Climbing 0000 360 Traction Downhill 000 0 361 After Driving Off Road 361 H Power Steering 4 RR 362 SOL ENGINE 2 2 seem awe Cae costes 362 SZL ENJIN foes seeds aed ei y ee 2a 363 Power Steering Fluid Check 364 E Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 365 E Parking Brak osoceseedqesstiuabexsswex 365 H Electronic Brake Control System 368 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 368 Traction Control System TCS 368 Brake Assist System BAS 369 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 370 Electronic Stability Control ESC 370 Trailer Sway Control TSC 373 Hill Start Assist HSA csse e409 s 374 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Ready Alert Braking 376 Radial Ply Tires i sire 390 Rain Brake Support 376 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC SH WERE a apices qus aed Off Indicator Light i cs Gaede ees 377 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 391 H Tire Safety Information cioe e 378 Full Size Spare If Equipped
4. Emergency Key Removal 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021334198 Separating RKE Transmitter 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 021334199 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the batte
5. TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause err
6. llle 398 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 100 Safety Defects Reporting 04 548 Safety Information Tire 0040 378 Safety VIPS s sona ioe 4S e acp eese IHR ES 96 Safety Exhaust Gas 0 0 00 0 0 48 97 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 315 Satellite Radio Antenna 004 305 Schedule Maintenance sess 528 Seat Belt Reminder 00 65 568 INDEX eee Seat Belts uve Sade ae Roe etas 52 98 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 57 And Pregnant Women 5 67 Child Restraint 0 0 00 0000005 82 90 Extender ce ve tket esi coda tae 67 Front Seat s ivskedaceau aad exa RR ate 52 INSPECHON 42e got dra e ues 98 Maintenance cod o reU EE raus 511 Preterisiofiets i Mae ead Rr Cale ae es 61 Reminder breu a ar ore ERES 252 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 57 Untwisting Procedure 57 Seats MT Em 120 Adjustment lees 125 Cleaning o ssesos da enhn ERE AE 510 Easy ENUY i 93 cee nes Sa des 143 MeCMOLY iaces oe cane x RR SS RU 140 POWER 3296 does cbe EN X ORO Ru 120 122 Rear Folding ee tA 136 Reclining come e rae s 126 Security Against Theft ases eges dhe Redes 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 250 Selection Of Oll x codes hin Pe ere raph eave 482 Sentry Key Immobilizer es ss ea esses ds mae
7. E 85 Fuel Electric Remote Mirrors 558 INDEX eee Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 216 Engine Electronic Brake Control System 368 Adr CLEAN Er ose see E e ce dne Rn 484 Anti Lock Brake System 368 Block Heater Les oin PRPERR REY 341 Brake Assist System 00004 369 Break In Recommendations 95 Electronic Roll Mitigation 370 Compartment 00 s4e a000 siit sad 475 476 Traction Control System ss ass aacra a iias 368 Compartment Identification 475 476 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 370 Cooling seeks REPRE RUR EE 494 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 163 166 Exhaust Gas Caution 48 997 414 Electronic Stability Control ESC 370 Fails to Start 2226 eV ES 340 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Flooded Starting seser neit ae ad 340 EVIC ce cem eoe ee oaths oaks 248 254 Fuel Requirements 410 524 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 351 Jump Starting 0 0 eee eee 463 Emergency In Case of Multi Displacement 0004 365 Hazard Warning Flasher 448 S eae TE 481 524 Jacking RE REESE 449 Oil Change Interval 00 482 Jump Starting 0 0 0 eee 463 Oil Disposal 0 00 0000004 484 TOW HOOKS zie kde Maa eom RR as 467 ulis M RM 484 Emission Control System Maintenance 4
8. NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The ventilated seat switches are used to control the speed of the fans located in the seat Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn t
9. To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Ente
10. 030909538 Power Seat Switches The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or 1 Seatback Switch down Pull upward or push downward on the front of 2 Seat Switch the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or backward Push the seatback switch forward or rear Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch bi Release the switch when you have reached the desired chest In a collision you could slide under the seat position belt which could result in serious injury or death WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped seat belt Some models are equipped with a six way power pas Continued Senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cush
11. T Flush and replace engine coolant at J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary S 104 000 miles 169 00 km or 60 months J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for C whichever occurs first damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary H E D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 1 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s J Replace the accessory drive belt s ood M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539 a a 0 O C O O O O 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filt
12. touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible
13. 072607742 wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If
14. Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The engine can be started two consecutive times with the
15. NOTE e e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance e There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position e The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button or overhead console close THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 button to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open If the power liftgate encounters
16. WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable steering wheel posi tion if equipped and the radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed 031109590 Driver Memory Buttons Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver
17. WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in AWD AUTO range and two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in AWD LOW range 372 STARTING AND OPERATING EE AUTO Range All Wheel Drive Models Or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD AUTO range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to AWD AUTO range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Mal function Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features
18. WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up Knee I mpact Bolsters high enough to block the location of the SABIC The Knee Impact Bolsteis help protect the Jensescol the The area where the SABIC is located should re driver and the front passenger and position front occu pe a ae pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Continued Air Bags 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
19. for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Front Rear Axle Fluid This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons failure This could result in a collision the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be tion taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Front Axle Fluid Level Check nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Continued The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below
20. the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 steering column lever is located below the multifunction NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory lever on the steering column Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE Y a MY N transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired 162 UNDERSTANDING
21. 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Maintenance Sched ule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency 438 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE Cooling System SNOW PLOW To reduce potential for engi
22. 4 Glove Compartment 5 Climate Controls 6 Lower Switch Bank 7 Hazard Switch 8 Storage Bin 9 ESC Off Switch 10 Ignition Switch 040134562 11 Headlight Switch 12 Hood Release 13 Fuel Door Release 14 Dimmer Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 i Each tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Un
23. Brake Limited ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions includi
24. DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir 3 6L MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs Engine EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Power Steering Reservoir 5 7L MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans Engine mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 528 Required Maintenance Intervals 529 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis
25. Door Storage 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE Center Console s sese tases awst ems 224 B Cargo Area Features 00 0 225 Rechargeable Flashlight 225 Cargo Storage s ovs es ex auo eres 226 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped secco ives ceed n 226 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 227 ll Rear Window Features 0 228 Rear Window Wiper Washer 228 Rear Window Defroster 229 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 230 Deploying The Crossbars 231 Stowing The Crossbars 234 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illumi
26. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry pl
27. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system CANCEL 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions When in Four Wheel Drive Low When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready Ada
28. Fuel esses tr screens ce ace E ence eta 250 SpeedMeter soa ci kadai aii ee kad e 249 Tachometer o cuui herd ef bea Epit Ea 244 en INDEX 561 Gear Ranges ise i aie eoe UR eae i ales 343 Gear Select Lever Override 468 General Information 20 29 186 409 Glass Cleaning ics iriiri oh e Ros dox S ok eae ac 511 Gross Axle Weight Rating 422 425 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 422 425 GVWR 2 dccuradondeid aka RE auda 6 iure 422 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 119 Hazard Warning Flasher scese sio sergen ss 448 Headlights oi i224 d0 n aa p e nn rE S 518 Bulb Replacement 205 519 Cleaning ed 5 aoa 6 eee et Gee ee av 510 High Beam 1 0 0 eee eee eee eee 248 On With Wipers 000000 147 Replacing ies 4 ise eam oa 4 eee ese aet 519 Heated Mirrors cse cte E Rom RR Res 110 Heater Engine Block iis eme 341 Hill Descent Control 1 sess be ere 249 Hill Start Assist sessies iama et araia esotas 374 Hitches Trailer TOWING ic ee wes 429 Holder Cup Lcxix e RISLwexu eae ERE 222 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 206 Hood Release llle 144 lgr ti m acto calewes Rin nee Sa eens s 16 Key cu Sans dre RR EDI teas d Te ates 14 16 Ignition Key Removal lesse 16 Illuminated Entry 0 2 00 0 00 eee eee 23 Immobilizer Sentry Key llle 18 Infant Restraint llle 82 83 Inf
29. SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ ous and next tracks e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List O
30. Slide the crossbar outward away from the center of the roof The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail Tightening Crossbar 1 Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the Crossbar to Side Rail opposite side Once the driver s side crossbar is in place tighten the thumb screws completely 037635149 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 CAUTION e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as Stowed Crossbars evenly as possible and secure the load appropri NOTE ately e To help control wind noise stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use 037635153 a Continued e If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interrup tion of satellite radio reception 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING e Load should always be secured to cross bars first with tie down loops used as additional securing points
31. because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns 030933466 3 even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Fold Flat Passenger Seat 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated and heated steering wheel seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate con trols You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press th
32. equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require servic
33. hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure th
34. hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 554 INDEX ae Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 166 Adding Fuel sranane EE a a ERE ES 418 Additives Fuel lees 413 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 484 Air Conditioner Maintenance 487 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 488 Air Conditioning System 0 319 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 328 Air Condi
35. nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect th
36. or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving charac teristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into ERS 3 thi
37. played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529 referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the
38. that caused the ESC activation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 5 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con E trol ESC is off OFF 6 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System amp e3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 7 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 8 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0q lights or headlights are turned on 9 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will a
39. wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Ej SS C E 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when 400 STARTING AND OPERATING EE the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects
40. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1076 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 trailer stability Trailer sway control
41. Adding Coolant Antifreeze 496 Coolant Capacity a css cce ai es 524 Coolant Level s qe testin isek bee RR 498 ee INDEX 557 Disposal of Used Coolant 497 Drain Flush and Refill 495 Inspection i o der b ERR Ape 494 Points to Remember lesus 498 Pressure Cap ise e b IR obe 497 Radiator Gap Ligas ores ders 497 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 495 524 Cruise Control Speed Control 166 C upholders t wees oa eR Res 222 Customer Assistance ee ee eee 545 Data Recorder Event 0 00 00 ce eee 81 Daytime Running Lights 149 Dealer Service 0 0 ce eee 480 Defroster Rear Window 00005 229 Defroster Windshield Ls 98 324 Diagnostic System Onboard 477 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 505 Oil Engine asserere te n3 eph mies 481 Power Steering 0 eee 364 Disabled Vehicle Towing 04 469 Disposal Engine Oil 42x Eee AA Rx te idan 484 Used Engine Fluids 00 484 Door LOCKS e cate aegis abe G oe a BEE SS 33 Door Locks Automatic 00000008 35 Door Opener Garage 1 0 eee 206 DAVNE ig te gone wal doe Bawa a Sloe rang due 358 Off Pavement llle 358 Off Road ics eee eR RS RRE ey 358 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy DVD Player Video Entertainment System
42. Amp Driver Door Node Natural J05 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Natural J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Pump Stability Con trol System J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Pink Valve Stability Con trol System ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J08 40 Amp Power Seat JA7 40 Amp Starter Motor Sole Green Green noid J09 30 Amp E Brake J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Pink Blue Module Powertrain J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Re Control Module Pink lay Contact Transmission Range J11 30 Amp Drive Train Control J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor Pink Module Yellow HI Radiator Fan Mo J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster tor Low Pink J20 30 Amp Front Wiper J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Off Fink Yellow Draw IOD JA 20 Amp Front Rear Washer J14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Lamps Blue Control Blue Park Lamps J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module J15 40 Amp Front Cabin Fan Natural Green Blower M1 pn Stop Lamp ue 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M2 20 Amp Electronic Limit Slip M11 10 Amp Heating Ventilation amp Yellow Differential Air Sus Red Air Conditioning Cli pension mate Control System M3 20 Amp Liftgate Unlock DRL M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier Yellow Rela
43. Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Three Position Switch 5 7L Engine If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated by the AWD Control Switch which is located on the center console AWD Control Switch Three Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides three mode positions e All wheel drive automatic range AWD AUTO e All wheel drive low range LOW RANGE e Neutral NEUTRAL 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads For variable driving conditions the AWD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels All wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction When additional traction is required the transfer case LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shift ing instructions The LOW RANGE position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire
44. Equipped Head Restraints 60 40 Split Rear Seat Folding Third Row 122 124 127 130 ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Memory Position Recall To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory Easy Entry Exit Seat ll To Open And Close The Hood B Lights Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped Headlights On Automatically With Wipers Smartbeam If Equipped 140 EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 149 High Low Beam Switch 155 Headlight Delay 0 149 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 155 Parking Lights And Panel Lights 150 Windshield Wiper Operation 156 Fog Lights If Equipped 150 Intermittent Wiper System Interior Lights 046 04 oe eanees 151 Windshield Washer Operation Lights On Reminder 152 Mist dese se m eee ORE Ae Rs 158 Battery Saver 152 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 158 Front Map Reading Lights 1522 MiTilt Telescoping Steering Column 160 Ambient Light ees 153 W Power Tilt Tele
45. Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal opera tion of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions stic
46. HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051210759 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift followed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will turn off This is a normal part of the overheat protec tion strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 6L engine or in direct gear 5 7L engine until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the followi
47. IN EMERGENCIES 060533362 Front Jacking Location 4 Fora rear tire place the jack and protective cap on the flange rearward of the hoist rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060637590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Install the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel 060635162 Lightly tighten the nuts m WARNING Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct w
48. Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This center contains cartridge fuses 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE and mini fuses A description of each fuse and compo nent may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart a 072710725 Totally Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J01 40 Amp Air Suspension Green J02 30 Amp Power Liftgate Mod Pink ule J03 30 Amp Trailer Tow Pink J04 25
49. Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporar ily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap 020207436 Emergency Key Removal the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started into the lock cylinders with either side up and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e The power window switches radio power sunroof if CAUTION Continued equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either OFF position Opening either front door will cancel e Jump Start the vehicle this feature The time for this feature is programmable e Charge the battery Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a CAUTION number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injur
50. Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with
51. NEUTRAL Key Ignition Park Interlock into any forward gear when the engine is above This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter idle speed lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position is firmly on the brake pedal The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The t
52. National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by
53. PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory p
54. Phe Remove replace malba 3 Once lower trim is loose close the liftgate 12 Reinstall the socket s 4 Open the flipper glass 13 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 1 Usea screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the license lamp lens 2 Pull bulb from socket 3 Replace bulb 4 Reinstall lens 073338554 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 6L and 5 7L Engines 25 Gallons 94 6 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Compon
55. SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on high
56. STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high
57. Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual AWD AUTO LOW RANGE SERV AWD For AWD Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low For AWD High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Oper s yn ating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Un
58. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls E 031705825 Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cau
59. The Light When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting The Afters has not been selected the display will read Adaptive He Lives Cruise Control Ready ACC 55 mph Rs 032433431 Example Only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning e Set Speed Change The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e System Cancel poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to Obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the System Off EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate e Distance Setting Change e Driver Override e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is
60. The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen 294 UNDERS
61. WARNING Continued REAR DO cee e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits Rear Window Wiper Washer described on the label attached to the left door or The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch left door center pillar located on the control lever The control lever is located Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put on the left side of the steering column heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident 036409579 Rear Wiper Washer Control Nd Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wip
62. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to securely stowed spares must be stowed with the be raised valve stem facing the ground Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic transmission in PARK Quos O T 3X Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a A jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a AR Lf jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Jack Warning Label Only use the jack in the positions indicated and 1 for lifting this vehicle during a tire change SSN Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 1 Loosen the lug nuts on the road wheel one turn but do 3 For the front axle place the jack and protective cap on not remove the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 2 Assemble the cover on top of the jack and attach the lug wrench to the jack tool with the hook 060533361 060637589 JAC A TOO Ay Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 458 WHAT TO DO
63. a ground connection and personal injury could result 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission WARNING SED TRIS on eae One HUNG Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex cal accessories plosion 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect
64. ambient light time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil second time The lights will also turn on when the ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed b ff ub 033333449 Ambient Light 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031509530 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 15
65. and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty 412 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the
66. and fade 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or p cr None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in th
67. be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer e
68. been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside rearview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check
69. catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing
70. checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi mper tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transm
71. closed if the sunroof is open N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Clo
72. cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission lock
73. data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child
74. death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 as RJ OG X sD e 7 Go amp TURN SONALS UCONNECT FOUR WHEEL BUTTON ORIVE LOW PUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINOSMIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT PRONT FOG LIGHT HOO RELEASE LOWER Am CONVENT E ELECTRONIC ALL WMERL PALUREOFANTHOCH WASHER Fund LEVEL OUIET 4WWDOWDOWN ETASILITY CONTROL DRIVE DAANG SYSTEM Ei e z00 Ot wee p se VA awo anake WINOSAELD UFTGATF RELEASE eLECTROWC GRANE SYSTEM ENGINE CE REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK UGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE NEFRO T AND WENTILATING FAN WNOOWIOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHER WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL OANE BRAKE ru F H TOW 3 ul QU PS a amp b d HAUL BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INST
75. detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031509578 Windshield Wiper Operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected sidii all Y Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled 031509581 Windshield Washer Operation 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 031509578 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature sens
76. distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 MASS 56789 mi Distance Setting 3 032435549 ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 2 Distance Setting 2 032435495 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi ACC 55 mph cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto DISTANCE 1 matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed 56789 mi Distance Setting 1 To change the distance setting press the Distance button e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph and release Each time the button is pressed the distance 24 km h and the system automatically disengages setting adjusts between long medium and short itself 0324355548 e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The distance setting is changed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 NE 8yF Cc e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Ac
77. done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button
78. engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is
79. engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Location Rotate the thumb screw on the jack to loosen the assem bly and remove the jack from the bracket WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451 drive nut The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening Thumb Screw Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle lug wrench connected to the square socket extension to rotate the spare tire 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Spare Tire Removal 1 Remove the jack tools from the bag 2 Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from storage compartment floor 3 Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the lug wrench handle and extension to completely lower the spare tire Keep turning the handle until the winch stops Lowering Raising Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIE
80. flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a transfer case shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flashers 448 B if Your Engine Overheats 448 H Jacking And Tire Changing 449 Jack Location sasa a dene deu 450 Spare Tire Stowage 2000000 451 Spare Tire Removal 452 Preparations For Jacking 455 Jacking Instructions 00 455 I jJump Starting eoa a ES Rare xr a Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped W Shift Lever Override Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB Rear Wheel Drive Models All Wheel Drive Vehicles 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank
81. h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will dis
82. how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most effi cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped wi
83. in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual
84. increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following
85. just above the climate controls A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control NING to high This allo
86. lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked WEENING when performing under the hood service or immedi e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine failure Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the intonmaHon Using the wrong type ot brake suid outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Continued Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle
87. liftgate press the button on the right side of the chrome accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle 021833019 Liftgate Passive Entry Button NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in EVIC the liftgate will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door Understanding Your Instrument Panel handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all To Lock The Vehicle s Doors four doors and MEI The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on NOTE the outside of the handles e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located
88. multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu ally If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB A
89. nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary Refer to All Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW Use first gear and LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or canno
90. of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ESC OFF Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion AWD Low Range LOW Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driv
91. on the vehicle s interior door panel 021834092 Outside Door Handle Lock Button 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position 021909602 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent relea
92. or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the
93. prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftg
94. purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either 424 STARTING AND OPERATING EE the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weig
95. rear doors To disable the window controls on the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again 021909603 m Window Lockout Button en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 022233885 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pulling LN up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftga
96. reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and
97. remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple ment
98. reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter 13 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC White Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 14 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4 the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and LOW rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 15 Hill Descent Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the a 4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position Off Road Mode 16 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 17 Fuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the EU vehicle where the fuel door is located 18 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 19 Airbag Warning Light This l
99. setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information Display Units Of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information System Status Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating E ITF Tire Pressure 33 m 33 33 8 as PSI Omi RUN 041038426 Tire Pressure Display E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires Genera
100. stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 1818e9557 Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 818e955e 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be lim
101. switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs e A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs e If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled 56789 mi 032433100 Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push the ON OFF button e You turn OFF the ignition e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h
102. the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint There are three top tether anchorages located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat remov ing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 a Child Restraint System CRS These types o
103. the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button
104. the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft Ibs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First
105. the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 WARNING Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in second and the sunroof will open automatically from any the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati tended children can become entrapped by the cally This is called Express Open During Express power sunroof while operating the power sunroof Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch switch Such entrapment may result in serious will stop the sunroof injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
106. the lamp wiring them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of disengage the lamp fronti thn the aperture panel the front fog lamp housing 5 Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged 7 Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from 5 Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening hmp 6 Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 7 Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the 8 Continue removing the trim lamp assembly Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 9 Disconnect the two trim panel lights 1 Raise the lifteate 10 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise 2 Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate
107. the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically un locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the
108. to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at wwwssirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps
109. to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE e Whenever an audibl
110. type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it become
111. until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names a
112. wear and damage to the driveline components Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages AWD AUTO and LOW RANGE are located in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When you select a different transfer case position the position indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the o
113. weight of the driver and all passengers 432 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for further information 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Towing Requirements Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the train components the following guidelines are recom proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer mended never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings CAUTION WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in
114. will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines A that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly instal
115. you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the CAUTION exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the
116. 0 46444 392 Tire Markings llle 378 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 393 Tire Identification Number TIN 381 Tire Spinning v xac ee raw ems Tire Terminology And Definitions 382 Tread Wear Indicators Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 383 Liter Of Titel uode tate era etn aise 395 H Tires General Information 387 Replacement Tires 0006 395 Tite Pressure iles md 387 W Tire Chains Traction Devices 397 Tite Inflation Pressures eewecesa see ees 988 ME Stow Tress oc Dodd 398 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 390 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 398 334 STARTING AND OPERATING EE H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 399 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 414 Base SySteM sese OE e ene 402 W Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only Premium System If Equipped 405 If Equipped s s en 414 General Information 409 ERPS OOM dpe keene eres 4s Bl Fuel Requirements 00000 e ee eee 410 PHIABDLENEEAECUQ cheba wag aay ogees aen TE 3 6L Engine If Equipped 0 0000 410 Fuel Requirements 06 416 s ME a hile 85 And Gasoline Vehicles s s 417 Reformulated Gasoline 411 Sire MORE 417 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 41
117. 1 Builds rca ace 417 Iron sage In Mor lex Purel Venice aiias P Replacement Parts 00 418 Le e us 72 OMointenane ss e 418 Materials Added To Fuel 413 Adding Fidl cesser rec ERR 418 Fuel System Cautions 413 F d Filler Cap Gas Cap 4coeues 4 ends 418 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message AM W Snow Plow 2s gov ae cei odee XR eRe ae 438 li Vehicle Loading Certification Label 422 B Trailer Towing 0 00 00 000 424 Common Towing Definitions 424 Trailer Hitch Classification 429 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 430 Trailer And Tongue Weight 431 Towing Requirements 432 Towing Nips 34399 REPRE en 437 422 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 439 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 439 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models ative separ ee tah Sas ees Recreational Towing All Wheel Drive Models Single Speed Transfer Case Recreational Towing All Wheel Drive Models Two Speed Transfer Case 441 336 STARTING AND OPERATING EE STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside
118. 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping position if equipped to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK OFF button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in
119. 4 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Fuel Economy 6 000 iios Vehicle Speed mese sep ees 269 Trip ING renes acier ener tp e boe cas 269 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 270 Units esa oh aati EE ens SERES 271 Keyless Enter N Go Display IF Equipped oc 028 cu sea Pee ae Gl 271 Compass Temperature Display 271 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Customer Programmable Features System Setup iis eee rm mee rne System Status 00000000 lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV It Bquipped 22a ode oe 4 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped lll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 292 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 0 0000 292 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 293 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 298 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 300 L
120. 5 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the left side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 031509530 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent forlow Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper the windshield wiper blades from returning to the operation park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first
121. 505 Brake ulum aene was s ua Reni ee Engine Oll cedere eee eae e445 Power Steering 560 INDEX eee Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 525 Fog light Service i ssec ERR ER 520 Fog Lights 2 42 RI em IRR 248 520 Folding Rear Seat deed mms 136 Forward Collision Warning 188 261 281 Four Way Hazard Flasher 448 Front Axle Differential lessen 501 Fuel gcse gts na oe EEG RISO ae oR deles 410 Additives puel EG REEL 413 Clean Air seeto peii vx PRESE 411 CONSERVING sese ua eneee Ee RES 268 Ethanol zsa 22 3 ak RR a DRE 411 Filler Cap Gas Cap 418 421 Gasoline racuna aa e a a a ia 410 Gauge Leste DOES S N E E NES 250 Light 52 2229 eere dorik 263 Materials Added issus 413 Methanol 43er deat CE e 411 Requirements sec enna kad Rada RR Rn 524 Saver Mode iaa a d en 268 Tank Capacity eg aso P ERI E ee tat 524 FuelOptimizer i222 4 e db RR deus 268 Piel Saver o sontes dune wd eae a acudieron 268 Fuel System Caution liliis 420 Fuel Flexible llle 414 BUSES diocese dad bbead km oetdatiddaed da res 511 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 206 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 418 421 477 Gasoline Puel i2zleneweee e ered eens 410 Conserving os s eh OTQpETRSdeE Rep Exe 268 Gasoline Clean Air ee 411 Gasoline Reformulated 411 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0004 252
122. 78 Oil Filter Disposal cem eee ee 484 Oil Selection lees 482 524 ne INDEX 559 Oil Synthetic ssie 3 eS eas iom eges 483 Overheating ausu aee daba es gore RP as 448 Martine a dice biased idediwedacne bes 336 Temperature Gauge o eeta ci nanea s a 252 Engine Oil Viscosity cs ess ert ie hashes 483 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 483 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 78 Entry System Illuminated Lus 23 Ethanol suu Ear acce oe a XO EORR a 411 Event Data Recorder lels 81 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 48 97 414 Exhaust System seisa ee ee eee es 97 491 Exterior Finish Care 0 0 0 0 00 0 ce eee 507 Exterior Lights 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee 100 Filters Air Cleaner 2 0 es 484 Engine Oil deed x ate s oe a 484 Engine Oil Disposal llle 484 Finish Care gees ai E qe ace Soa vedo e Re 507 Hashers 2s use e it Sat QURE ERES NE RES 448 Hazard Warning iier 448 Tort Signal RR 100 248 519 521 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range oo ace d de Ra 417 Engine Oil 13280444233 RR gen ERES 417 Fuel Requirements 414 416 Maintenance 32x aS ERE Gia wane 418 Replacement Parts 000 418 Star hg bs casdisggesdaenanuna onions s 417 Flooded Engine Starting 340 Fluid Capacities seoanei E a a a 524 Fluid Leaks 24 2 2o o o eG 100 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 503 504
123. ABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 5 3x n oi a seise catcns le RUE RH RUROR IR OR RH tts E ACRIOR A CREAR CAL Roe enin 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee nnn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee nnn la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eeesessessecseccoecsecoecceccsees 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cc cee cc cece cece cece hh rh m nnn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 2c cece cece ccc c reece eer hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece ccc c cece cere eee cere eeeeeeeveens 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cc cece c ccc c ccc c eee ehh mtn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece ccc c cee c reece eee eer han 10 INDEX ceritain UU E E EEE TE E UT INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction sesennnnem 4 W Warnings And Cautions 04 8 a Rollover Warning esie ees 5 W Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many pas
124. AG are embossed on the air bag covers 022633896 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat e Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in e the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but t
125. Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably modified to accommodate a disabled person contact extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided instrument panel under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown tha
126. Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and exterior lights blink 3 times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from res
127. DODGE OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC T
128. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e Ifthe system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or c amp high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these mo
129. E LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 031434068 Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight D switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Ww EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed e To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO positi
130. E 55 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your s abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous pit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an injury A belt worn under the arm can cause accident internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder WARNING bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
131. ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking E structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Uconnect Multi
132. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Customer Programmable Features System Setup e Compass Display Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel A wad through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info Vehicle Info Mes sages Units System Setup Turn Menu Off and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll W downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access 040909599 to main menus sub menus or to select a per i sonal setting in the setup menu EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Vehicle Not in Park Key Left Vehicle Key Not Detected Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Premium TPM System Graphic Display Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting And Operating
133. Extender 0 0 0 00005 67 a Cheeks YOu nou LE Make neice The Welles costosa vans i MeL MIRATUR 98 2 cd c R 4 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make EF ee eee eS ee Gael eee ee Outside The Vehicle 0 0 00 100 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 70 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON RUN position NOTE With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for fur
134. F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on Washing trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild The following maintenance recommendations will enable car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with you to obtain maximum bene
135. G AND OPERATING 363 NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Ifthe condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers 364 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with
136. Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that
137. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition 390 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tire
138. ME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting
139. ON When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami
140. Parksense Rear Park Assist System Cleaning The Parksense System Parksense System Usage Precautions lll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If Equipped Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio ll Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights Sunglass Bin Door 197 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 206 Programming HomeLink 207 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 210 Using Homelink ss Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 000 SeCUFI0y sacks ane od VP eee Ede ionis 211 Troubleshooting Tips ces reeur nasi 211 General Information 212 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 212 Opening Sunroof Express 213 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 213 Closing Sunroof Express 214 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 214 106 Pinch Protect Feature Venting Sunroof Express Sunshade Operation Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Ignition Off Operation Sunroof Fully Closed Bi Electrical Power Outlets ll Power Inverter If Equipped lll Cupholders li Storage Glove Compartment
141. RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn to Run will display in the EVIC until you insert the key Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information e For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter N G
142. RUMENT PANEL BEAT BELT 3LOING 000a TWUMK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNWG TOW hau CHARGING DEFROST ULLAL TOI RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON pare 4 w e o Noo L amp va de GLOW PLUG POWER WOGSHELD PER SUE AIRBAG AIRBAG EMERGENCY LiGHTES AND TETHER FOR HAZARD RELEASE MANOLE CHILDREN LATCH C Sup 000a sus X Aa bo Al Cy B M A ine i F wee A2 LH pusa e macase oleme TEMPERATURE aeaaea Amasc ore AM PISO TOP Ue e iui ag CONOMONeR SIABRTIY CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010809610 en INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any mod
143. RUMENT PANEL ME 14 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for both zones from the driver temperature control 15 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings 16 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings 17 Rear Control Button Provides the rear seat occupants with independent blower and temperature control Push the button to activate the rear climate control and allow the rear seat occupants control of the rear blower and temperature settings Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature control buttons Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e t is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The te
144. S 453 4 Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it 5 Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull vertically behind the rear bumper the metal stamping toward you to release it from the plastic plate Spare Tire 3 060635159 Tab Location 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6 Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube 7 Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the and winch cable Rotate the metal stamping and push it protective plate from the steel spare wheel through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel E Releasing Protective Plate Sleeve And Cable EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 Preparations For Jacking 3 Block the diagonally opposite 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface away from wheel traffic WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack when the vehicle is being jacked or changing the wheel Jacking Instructions 2 Place the transmission in PARK set the parking brake m and activate the Hazard Warning flashers MARMING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Continued 456
145. Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire 392 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equ
146. TANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with cal
147. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be
148. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTIN
149. This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward
150. UR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode qe Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high unless the blower is controlled manually NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield
151. VEHICLE 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position will withdraw any slack in the belt If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to C allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack From Belt Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating posit
152. WARNING S eU some tips for getting the most out of your child So Rear ara acing CRX Dod must never De une i Before buying any restraint system make sure that it the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The second row seating positions are equipped with automatic locking retractors ALR To install child restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until t
153. a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Elec
154. aa eese a ates 107 Automatic Dimming s 108 Occupant Restraints 48 74 78 Electric Powered llle 109 Occupant Restraints Sedan 71 72 74 77 Electric Remote 0 0 0000000 109 ee INDEX 565 Odometer 3 ree Sh hae CRT ae eee 248 Tip iie dokae fae ated SOR oral SS 248 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 358 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 358 Oil Change Indicator 004 267 Oil Change Indicator Reset 267 Oil Engine 26e bes gn REY d Er Eu Rs 481 Capacity wach oibus deems e iE 524 Change Interval selle 482 DIBSBCK esris wr br o9 e ea una deua 481 Disposal sues es degrees 484 Filter z izzeres nu e e LER E de 484 Filter Disposal 2 2 0 0 0 0 0200 484 Identification Logo ee 482 Materials Added to 005 484 Recommendation 05 482 524 Synthetie cd usted xe RR ORO E pns 483 VISCOSILy es esaet aede oed OR es 483 524 Onboard Diagnostic System 477 478 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 206 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 2 05 109 Overdrive 26e nes ohh SSE RRR ee eS 347 Overdrive OFF Switch 2 0005 347 Overhead Console 2 00 0 00 0 ee eee 204 Overheating Engine 205 253 448 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 549 Paint Care igor
155. able normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You engage Four Wheel Drive Low If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 23456 mi 032433107 FCW Message NOTE The minim
156. about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SSS Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel 7 or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 5 and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle Ww set the Mode control to Recirculate cJ with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level 7 pulls with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature Q a Ta control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S D UN CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bg TY i Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear TOME m COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control
157. ace with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels 3906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME It is recommended you contact your original equipment WARNING Continued or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use Never use a tire with a smaller load index or equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the capacity tha
158. adio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current s
159. al additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine Regular fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 CAUTION Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the ration in transmission shift quality and or torque fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur temperatu
160. almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M
161. an 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift or towing dolly All Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicles with a two speed transfer case may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEU TRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Vehicles equipped with a single speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position and therefore must be towed will all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission and or trans fer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 6L 475 E Engine Compartment 5 7L 476 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 477 Loose Fue
162. and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and brak ing performance and could result in a collision 057007122 Weight distributing hitch systems may not be Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information 428 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 057007121 057007120 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer H
163. ar Camera 0 0 0 eee eee eee 202 Rear Cross Path 4 seis XXe e 117 Rear Cupholder sas 029 ie RERO 222 Rear Heater 42 2 21 rRex4 eL ERE ER 326 Rear Park Sense System 000005 193 Rear Seat Folding soe e ce eee Rn 136 Rear Window Defroster 2 00 229 Rear Window Features 0 020005 228 ee INDEX 567 Rear Wiper Washer sees 228 Rearview Mirrors leeren 107 Reclining Front Seats 0000000 126 Recorder Event Data 0 000000 eae 81 Recreational Towing 0000006 439 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 442 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 444 Reformulated Gasoline 0000 0 411 Refrigerant xs euet a Ee Oe a Cae s 488 Reminder Seat Belt llle 65 Remote Control Starting System 1 eee rassaa 29 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 316 Remote Starting System 0 000 29 Replacement Bulbs 0 0 0 0 000 517 Replacement Keys 0 0 0 0 taaie nekea 19 Replacement Parts 22s cse seco e ee 479 Replacement Tites sce ug RR Salas 395 Reporting Safety Defects 0 548 Restraints Child llle 82 Restraints Occupant seses tisnrriesibreniiss 48 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 226 Roll Over Warning cie Ee ORE Peas 5 Roof Type Cartier sce ete der e neg 230 Rotation Tires
164. ar seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel seating positions route the tether under the head re To Access Top Tether Strap straints and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on the back of the seat To access the top tether 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback Top Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly be hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Top Tether Strap Attachment For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel For the outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook to the t
165. are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to ce
166. as a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera tional The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually ve
167. ascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect a
168. ase do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic
169. ate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine IF EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into E 85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to Continued C STARTING AND OPERATING 415 the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and CAUTION gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Ethanol Fuel E 85 When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full WARNING e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when Etha
170. ate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicat
171. atic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change
172. ats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks C
173. audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt
174. ay shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 7 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings 10 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 12 Climate Control ON OFF Button Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
175. ays remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in juries or death 021809604 Power Door Locks Power Door Lock Switch The power door lock switch is located on each front door _ If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming If Equipped The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicl
176. behind the seatback allow passengers to easily access the third row seats 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat F Tumble Strap 030935959 Release Lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in the tumbled position The second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury To Raise Rear Seat Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place i 030940548 WARNING Tumbled Second Row Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Folding Third Row Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the cargo area To lower either seat pull on the release handle located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the pull strap located next to the release handle Third Row Folded NOTE The second row seats must be in their full upright position or tumbled when folding the third row seats To raise the seat pull the seat toward you using the strap Release Handles located on the back of the seat 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177. being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person
178. bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on h
179. bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road f
180. by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Ple
181. ck Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system
182. cle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR Third Row ALR N A ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatica
183. combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of 3 900 Ibs 1 769 kg If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle NOTE Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package are limited to 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs tongue weight Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions STARTING AND OPERATING 431 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The
184. configurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of x an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 CAUTION e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until damage to the engine control system It also could fuel is added affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is Loose Gascap Indicator flashing severe catalytic converter damage and PE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines power loss will soon occ
185. control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the DEFROST mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature trailer tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for
186. coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper system in an emergency it should be replaced with maintenance intervals the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Selection Of Coolant possible Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they information may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolan
187. ctivated Display ECO Symbol If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Gauge Glow Rings The gauge glow rings that illuminate the tachometer and speedometer in the instrument cluster can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto High Beams Available With SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed s
188. d Backup Lamps ss oe eae beng Ta Ee be oe ex 521 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 522 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL eses dert edd ne eras 523 Rear License Lamp 0000 523 W Fluid Capacities 2zaxe ace kx rae Es 524 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 525 Engine 2202 Ede der eade Pars 525 Chassis cic exe eh aede oe Opa diet 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 9 8 z 6 074410741 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 071410750 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle
189. d Vehicle Indicator The system detects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Brake If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle If the ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits fu
190. d row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air and clockwise for heated air Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of 4 these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature
191. decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check WARNING with your local authorities to determine the disposal e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution mals and children do not store ethylene glycol based N dd lant antif he th engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it Er n Nu Mem E to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child Miri or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald
192. der inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment t
193. derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF F Cw This light warns the driver of a potential colli OF F sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Power Steering System Over Temperature If Equipped If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER e TEMP message and a icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steer ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle After five minutes the system 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se will cool and return to normal operation Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further infor mation NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Ifthe condition persists see your authorized dealer for service EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show re
194. des are selected 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear Climate Control If Equipped The Rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle If the rear system is off changing the rear setting to a position other than off will turn the rear system on If both the front and rear systems are off turning the rear system on from the rear controls will also turn on the front system on 045633895 Rear Manual Climate Controls 1 Rear Blower 2 Rear Climate Control Icon 3 Rear Temperature Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an off position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the thir
195. dicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACCIFCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal directio
196. disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped zm This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment 050105203 Installing And Removing The ENGINE START STOP Button Installing The Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing The Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose 338 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal
197. ditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthor ized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks power liftgate and flipper glass are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the head lights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself T
198. driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be periodically inspected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can
199. e Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system OCCO O CO C O C O Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule M A N T Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E Q Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before N filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km A T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the N irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 3 104 000 miles 169 000 km M Replace the air conditioning filter
200. e Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 23 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the red center stack upper switch bank This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected 24 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 25 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any readin
201. e The outboard headrests are not removable 030933142 EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints For improved visibility when in reverse the third row head restraints can be folded using a switch located on the instrument panels switch bank yf NOTE The head restraints can only be folded down ward using the power folding switch The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row Press the power folding switch located on the instrument panel to fold the head restraints 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 60 40 Split Rear Seat Fold Flat The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard side of the seat 030935960 Fold Flat Second Row Seat 030935959 Release Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Easy Access For Third Row 2 Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
202. e and e This device must accept any interference received e This device may not cause harmful interference reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the including interference that may cause undesired TPMS will update automatically operation In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the b will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a following licenses new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limitin United States MRXCAWAMAA any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to Canada 2546A CAWAMAA be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800diab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded
203. e shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support Power Lumbar Switch 030909539 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Some models may be equipped with a manual front Release the bar once you have reached the desired passenger seat The passenger seat can be adjusted for position Then using body pressure move forward and ward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters the seat cushion near the floor hav
204. e Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest info
205. e Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pu
206. e Service Keyless System refer to Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry if equipped Service Park Assist System Park Assist System Blinded Keyfob Battery Low Left front turn signal lamp out Right front turn signal lamp out Left rear turn signal lamp out Right rear turn signal lamp out Service air filter Low Tire Pressure Perform service ESC System Off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Service blind spot system Blind spot detection unavailable Blind spot system off Blind spot detection unavailable sensor blocked Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Adaptive Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Sense
207. e after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 548 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your v
208. e air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats i 1022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that p
209. e alert is requested by the BSM system the radio is also muted e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a hands free system that allows you to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in your mobile phone Press the Uconnect Phone button on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR button vr located on the radio or steering w
210. e is equipped with a matching full size If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of five seconds and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not havea tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of five seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition
211. e is no notification to the driver and the driver should not notice it ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 377 The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the
212. e latched mE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjustment Bar 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever 030933465 Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into place UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
213. e performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstanc
214. e switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console 030909669 Rear Heated Seat Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF
215. e the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing LJ Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for L damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN gt Z V 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service ill 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Idi Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter N lin Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before A filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km N T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the E irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km J Replace the air conditioning filter S Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km IE C1 I
216. e vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 WARNING CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death NOTE If snow ice mud o
217. e www techauthority com EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering
218. ed Do not leave the Key e If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Continued cause serious injury or death e Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position With the Keyless Enter N Go feature opening the driv er s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the re minder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized v
219. ed eed RE 45 Transmitter Battery Replacement 27 Power Liftgate If Equipped 46 CXHCTAEEMOUUAHONL wai peia S 2 E Occupant Restraints 000 48 M Remote ireng Equipped ee era 7 Lap ShoulderBelis 0 00000 00 52 How Io Use Remote SIUE sionem did a0 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 53 liM Door Locks o ice ew RR eee 33 lap Shouda Hal Unbwistine Pupcpd nd a 67 Manil Doce Lode ea p isin sates Be Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 57 Power Door Locks 0 0 000005 34 Energy Management Feature 58 aia inlay ick e Mod 86 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 59 Bl Keyless Ente N Go serene 38 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 74 e ca iore amic ctondeaisd 9a Event Data Recorder EDR 81 i a a Child Restraints corsi onda aeas andes 82 TERUDSIU HSE SONED cox rina qiii tr SEM dd s Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 95 PENIS nonsed SEHR MUS EH sca ME Mi Safety Tips iiio Rr ER ERR oes 96 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Transportne Passeneers 96 20 MEROKNEMNNREC ME 65 porting GETS Sai mapi see ae Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 67 Exhaust Gas 0 eee eee 97 Seat Belt
220. ehicle s recommended cold tire pressure After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure value always reinstall the valve stem cap This will CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have NOTE been established for the tire size equipped on your e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care mm vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire damage may result when using replacement failure or condition equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes damage to the sensors may result the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Continued Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached t
221. ehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea sure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operat ing for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when t
222. ehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Passing Overtaking Approaching 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changin
223. ehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 549 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mail
224. ehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems ma
225. election or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and
226. em charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface Front Fog L og Lamps clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and Always use the correct bulb size and type for disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connec replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may tor overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze or
227. ent Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case 3 6L Engine Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent Transfer Case 5 7L Engine MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR
228. eopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path es STARTING AND OPERATING 371 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions
229. epresenting the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 382 STARTING AND OPERATING EEEEEEEEEEEEEMAMMMEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEECC Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Ti
230. er Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 gt l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the f
231. er action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode 374 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 appro
232. er what their size Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 c 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat CCS WARNING Continued ME Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding go around your lap in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Latch Plate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries AIways buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate to Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
233. ers will cycle two times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal opera tion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior
234. ert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist ON Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa the system is sounding an audio tone tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for Pya OFF 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under
235. es 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary mi mi OCC C O C O Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace i
236. es both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below AWD AUTO All Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The all wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 LOW RANGE All Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed all wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the re
237. es equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Loc
238. es moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features
239. es should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oi
240. estraint such as coats seat covers or portable LIT DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907533 of a collision and could result in serious injury or Active Head Restraint Tilted death NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they ward on the head restraint to lower it are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their 1 normal position when the rear seat is raised After Rear Head Restraint returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in plac
241. f necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L O O C C O L Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 533 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes mi mi O OO C O C Chang
242. f seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi tions section The chart below defines the seating posi tions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR Third Row ALR N A ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull i
243. f the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number r
244. fit from the corrosion clear water resistance built into your vehicle y e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu What Causes Corrosion lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes are Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to ore protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint 7 Stone ane gravel impact e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint P Phot y e P inisn Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint
245. for further information e If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for approximately 72 hours the Passive Entry feature for the handle may time out Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s Passive Entry feature e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time Unlocking the vehicle by RKE transmitter or Keyless Enter N Go and not opening any door will cause the doors to re lock and arm theft alarm if equipped To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of
246. for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause
247. g a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Vehicle Speed This feature allows you to monitor your vehicle speed on the EVIC display press and release the SELECT button to change the units of measure between in MPH or km h Trip Info This feature allows you to track the total distance trav eled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode dis plays the following information Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until V
248. g lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including radio muting WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure
249. g within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster N E m y FM 101 9 12 Fuer Economy J ACC OFF Vehicle Speed Omi RUN D 041038427
250. gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance
251. ge quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you
252. ges from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Step 5 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Butt
253. h and turn it to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button located by the selector switch until the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off NEUTRAL Switch 7 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL button 8 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 446 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift transmission into PARK A 0 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 3 Press and hold the brake pedal a 14 Release the parking brake A 5 Shift the transmission into gear and check that the vehicle operates normally 16 The Keyless Enter N Go button if equipped may now be reinstalled if desired Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Oper ating for further information Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will
254. han you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the
255. have the letter I High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall o
256. he GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ME rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR
257. he desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE IfSteps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer
258. he ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These
259. he ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is drive
260. he level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning mes sage to appear or the chime to sound V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are l
261. he ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated EE 030905581 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in t
262. heck area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped Outside Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 110 Sun Visor Extension If Equipped 111 li Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 111 Rear Cross Path isses sas eae 117 Modes Of Operation 0 0 118 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 119 H Voice Command If Equipped 120 iro rr 120 Power Seats If Equipped 120 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped Power Lumbar If Equipped Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward Rearward Adjustment Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped Ventilated Seats If
263. heel controls if equipped eee belts In a collision people riding in these areas Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Manual located on the DVD for further details e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and SEATS using a seat belt properly Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches WARNING are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or switches that control the movement of the seat cushion outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in and the seatback these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down lE The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
264. heel nut tightness is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the small center cap and position the alumi num road wheel behind rear bumper with the beauty side facing rearward 060635163 Beauty Side 11 Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective plate in the lug holes of the road wheel Push the end of the winch s cable spring steel sleeve and stamped cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and protective plate WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461 060635164 060635165 m Installing Winch Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location 12 Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec NOTE Double check to ensure the tire is snug against tive plate until it is directly under the winch and between the underbody of the vehicle Damage to the winch cable the rear bumper and exhaust system heat shields Raise may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose the tire by turn the lug wrench on the winch extension clockwise until it clicks ratchets three times to make sure the cable is tight 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools may damage the winch mecha nism 13 Lower the jack to the fully closed position Return the tools to the proper positions in the tool bag Fold the flap on the tool bag u
265. hen immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps and horn will remain on E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436
266. here is enough allowance to pass it through the child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Retractors Mode earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the owners manual e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These chi
267. hey will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components e Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as on the instrument panel because any such objects determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision which may receive information from the front impact severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate sensors Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage th
268. hicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section 470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Towing Condition Wheels OFF RWD MODELS AWD MODELS the Ground See instructions in Recreational Tow If transmission is operable ing under Starting and Operating Fiat Tow NONE e Trans in NEUTRAL e Trans in PARK e 30 mph max 48 km h e 15 miles 24 km max distance e T case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction Front NO Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Rear OK NO Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK po
269. hile average fuel economy is highlighted Once reset the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner N m 72 Fuel Economu RUG 999 DTE LOLJFUEL MPG 10 20 l Ori 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Addin
270. hould not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking 022607497 Mechanism 1 Downward Movement 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock 2 Rearward Movement into the back decorative plastic half ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
271. howing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Intermittent Wiper If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Lights Only mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time Blind Spot Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located e
272. ht must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed t
273. ic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automaticall
274. icle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AQ WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up 80bfedfO Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION EE Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway
275. if needed Tie loops are intended as supple mentary tie down points only Do not use ratchet ing mechanisms with the tie loops Check the straps and thumbwheels frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached Long loads that extend over the windshield such Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel Features 242 H Instrument Cluster 00000 243 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 244 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 254 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays e 1G S24 IH i ke Gia acs 256 EVIC White Telltale Lights 260 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 262 EVIC Red Telltale Lights 26
276. ifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys asc ku ern 14 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 20 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 Rearming The System 21 Key FOB 522v came ene ea res 15 To Arm The System 00000 21 Removing Key FOB From Ignition 16 To Disarm The System suus 22 Key In Ignition Reminder 18 Tamper Alert wa 26 0 ge RE pe ERES 23 Mi Sentty Key iizseceu 69 ex RR er ER 18 illuminated Entry sor RR 23 Replacement Keys llle 19 W Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Customer Key Programming 20 To Unlock The Doors 24 General Information lille 20 To Lock The Doors 000006 25 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Remote Open Window Feature l Windows e RR 42 ge a sericis dene e perat opea n Power Windows s sccsies surt rirei sista 42 a a qt wrote qid 26 Wind Buffeting isses 45 Piogramtuns Ae iaana Bane sea Bie gt bw oe ete sU bx d
277. iftgate may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system
278. ight will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first V turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Amber Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber caution telltales For further information refer to Elec tronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 22 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake
279. ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 378 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Tires designed to this standard
280. ii eee iesise 100 146 519 521 Vanity Mirror 1 ee 110 Loading Vehicle osse 6 0 6 ee ee 422 VAMOS c oie uer acr dade ce bu XS RE 383 Jod TC 33 Automatic Door llle 35 Child Protection llle 36 DOOR teg Sakae seg ace OUS ec ES Rene dee 33 Power Door 0000 ce eee eee 34 564 INDEX ees Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Exterior Folding ii e es 109 LATCH s cuc acer ih ES a Sole FERES 86 88 Heated m 110 Lubrication Body 825 sore ss 488 Outside 44iisssebesd x Penta eed ues 109 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 230 ReatyvieW so anaes ced RO A KURSE RR UR 107 Vanity sedes wh tide etes ti P E 110 Maintenance Free Battery 04 485 Mode Maintenance Procedures 0 05 480 FuelSavef senai v0e pe dade epee dc 268 Maintenance Schedule ss 528 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 245478 Monitor Tire Pressure System 399 Manual Service llle 549 Mopar PariS e koe QR ep YO 479 548 Memory Feature Memory Seat 140 MTBE ETBE sese 411 Memory Seat 6 ee 140 Multi Displacement Engine System 365 Memory Seats and Radio 140 Multi Function Control Lever 146 Methanol 2 0364 ea e e ea een 411 Mini Trip Computer 000006 269 New Vehicle Break In Period 95 Mitro esters a g
281. ilm Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 1 NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the blade holder 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder L9 Was
282. imming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 P Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature h
283. ing mechanism may ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The WARNING Continued parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver ie notin the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision WARNING Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 368 STARTING AND OPERATING EE ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lo
284. ing or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely
285. ing studios NOTE SIRIUS Backseat TV service is not available in Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD RER Navigation RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multi media User Manuals for detailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats 8161d54e i Remote Control Location xixU CU MUN MK e I UU DUET 3044806358 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Lowering the Display Screen The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Som 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Pressing the center button will ma
286. ing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 550 Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at
287. ion CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that th
288. ions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position 7 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es As a guide if you are shorter than average you will This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This you will prefer a higher position When you release the feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that the occupant s chest it is locked in position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is WARNING equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re position without pushing the release button To verify the tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on tion is not working properly when checked ac the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into cording to the procedures in the Service Manual position Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Energy Management Feature This vehi
289. ions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the left rear storage bin 3 Pull the release cable STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Release Cable Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines d that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ME in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by
290. ipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle
291. ires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of x an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause Malfunction I
292. is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the r
293. ission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you tu
294. isss 349 Autost ck i e 9 dex RE 345 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 216 Auxiliary Power Outlet 00 216 B Pillar Location eee 383 Battery cies nod se qe ore gend de dolus 485 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 27 Belts Seat i i iu ssa Read wea ER 52 98 Blind Spot Monitoring lille 111 Body Mechanism Lubrication 488 Brake Assist System 000000000 eee 369 Brake Control System Electronic 368 Brake Flid 2e ER erence nea Enean 500 Brake System sess 3 Age Sea o Zu s 499 Anti Lock ABS i cce RR 368 Fluid Check sss aces Rec we 500 Master Cylinder iu accedi ctr eras 500 Parking 22 2s Gist te Pet rae ees 365 Warming Light sed d wea e Res 250 Brake Transmission Interlock 343 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 95 Bulb Replacement 2050 517 518 Bulbs Light 15 cis tich aie cee Pe tace thks 100 Calibration Compass 000 0000 0 ee 273 Camera Rear cerda ea bwin es dne ee ea Bi ME 202 Capacities Fluid so ea ged ros 524 Caps Filler F l 2csik ERR IA SE baw wh ak 418 Power Steering suares panai aaa aa 364 Radiator Coolant Pressure 497 Car Washes 44 444 dee sw RYE aew card 507 Carbon Monoxide Warning 97 414 Cargo Vehicle Loading 00 422 Cargo Area Cover Cargo Area Features 556 INDEX ee Cargo Compartment e
295. ist Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 303 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 303 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio It Equipped s Rear RR Reps 304 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 E iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 308 W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 316 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Radio Operation 00006 317 DEVICES uda cx quee beds a aa 309 COPE s cas pax ta end videt 318 Using This Feature 00 310 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance issus 318 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 310 Be Radio Opereion sand Mobile Hhones vestis Play Mode esee 310 a Climate Controls Loss es ch RC n Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control List Or Browse Mode 312 ATC If Equipped sese 319 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 314 Rear Climate Control If Equipped 326 ll Uconnect Multimedia Operatine Tips 328 Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped 315 P a ruens Operating Tips Chart 330 li Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV If Equipped 315 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio
296. isting on your audio device e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in To exit List mode without selecting a track press the extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or same PRESET button again to go back to Play damage the device Follow the device manufactur mode er s guidelines e LIST button The LIST button will display the top Placing items on the iPod or external USB device level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn or connections to the iPod or external USB device the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will and or to the connectors display the next sub menu list item on the audio in the vehicle can cause damage to the device 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth St
297. itch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 430 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Model GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GIW Gross Trailer Wt Max Trailer Tongue Wt See Note 3 6L 4x2 11 600 Ibs 5 262 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sqm 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 620 lbs 281 kg 3 6L 4x4 40 sq ft 3 72 sqm 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 620 Ibs 281 kg 5 7L 4x2 11 600 Ibs 5 262 kg 13 100 Ibs 5 942 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 720 Ibs 326 kg 5 7L 4x4 13 100 Ibs 5 942 kg ML EL JC jo 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m VL EI a 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg o c I 720 Ibs 327 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the
298. ited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations Classification Specifications where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and 47 CER Part 15 47 C F R Part 15 515 the vehicle ahead is duas in your lane Always be attentive and ready to a the brakes if necessar Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km
299. k System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021806189 LI Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision 021837447 Child Protection Door Lock Location Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicles Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel
300. ke the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc b
301. ker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned
302. l for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and t
303. l French Francais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK butt
304. l letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance
305. l Filler Cap Message 477 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs eines se er kr ee eee HE ES 478 B Replacement Parts n on RR 479 Mi Dealer Service unuunu aaua 480 Bi Maintenance Procedures 480 Engine Oll e atre etait tes irato r 481 Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid iss Exhaust System Cooling System 474 Brake System icu coe degen e rae 499 Front Rear Axle Fluid Lien 501 Transfer Case 2 2 0 ee ee 502 Automatic Transmission 503 Appearance Care And Protection From COIIOSIODL 23 cee e ek RE EXER AE 506 a uses oe RR MESURER ees 511 Totally Integrated Power Module 511 a Vehicle Storage eass aee ome e mne rmn 517 li Replacement Bulbs cae esas e nn 517 B Bulb Replacement 222 a s x Rr rx RS 518 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped ecce reme ym 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 519 Front Turn Signal 00000 519 Front Fog Lamps 2 2 9 nes 520 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal An
306. l Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Starting And Operating for additional information e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User mm Manual located on the DVD for further details 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate GI SINGLE DISC wa 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLU
307. l improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Materials Added To Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on
308. l towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Shift the transmission into PARK 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing All Wheel Drive Models Single Speed Transfer Case Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL N position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require CAUTION Continued e Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case The transmission must be placed in the PARK position for recreati
309. lation Pressure Tires llle 388 Information Center Vehicle LL 254 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 107 Instrument Cluster lesen 243 244 Instrument Panel and Controls 242 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 562 INDEX BEEN Integrated Power Module Fuses 511 Interior Appearance Care 005 509 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 156 Introduction ed hene RR n RR Rcs 4 Inverter Power 0 0 ce 220 Jack Location s ca priiis 00 00 eee 450 Jack Operation 0 00 00 0 emeyi 449 455 Jacking Instructions llle 455 Jump Starting 6 eee 463 Key In Reminder 0 00002 ee eee 18 Key Programming cass arara fasia Capana 20 Key Replacement esegi ea aeina 19 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 18 Keyless Enter N Go 000 38 271 337 Keyless Entry System llle ss 24 Keyless GO xir aded ey YR hee e EROR 14271 KEYS V rm 14 Lap Shoulder Belts 02000 52 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 86 88 Latches someterse enega seat heed AURA RE 100 Lead Free Gasoline 02 00002 eee 410 Leaks Fluid uuu ae ER erem al 100 Life of Tires o iscas ecu ua Reo REDE wanes 395 Liftgate eise d e RR RR 45 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 228 Light Bulbs se I 9 n 100 Lighl 9 tese exe ee ERR ER 100 146 Airbag s
310. ld seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH
311. lectronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compart Center Console USB AUX Connector Port ment Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific
312. led or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to
313. level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission 5 7L only and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the firs
314. lly pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure t
315. lose to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11WDo1 126 AD Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
316. m the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Lamps ese ninri eueut Ee ied 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W VT4976 Overhead Console Reading Lamps Rear Cargo Lamp esea llle 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp lisse eene V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 0 74 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Lights Headlamp High Intensity Discharge Bulb Type HID RIXA Service at Authorized Dealer Headlamp Low Beam oonan anaa aaa H11 Headlamp High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn Lamp 7444NA Front Fog Lamps PSX24W Front Side Marker nori ere RR WSW Rear Turn Stop Tail Lamps 3057 Liftgate Tail Lamps llle esee 194 Backup Lamps llle 921 W16W Rear License Lamps 0 W5W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHIMSIL i dee teni e Bah tome ae LED CHMSL is not serviceable It is a LED lamp To replace the LED the entire CHMSL assembly mu
317. mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Hill Start Assist HSA When this feature is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating infor mation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been dea
318. media Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within fi
319. mirrors fasten your seat belt and if Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat ing precautions are not observed belts e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to E uoo RNING Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission 7 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm before shifting into any driving gear engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will
320. mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 031309526 Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 2 Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood ue To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 030934064 Safety Latch Location 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICL
321. mperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counter clockwise 045633350 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions 324 UNDERSTANDING YO
322. n depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ParkSense Display ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Park Assist ON Rear Park Assist Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Park Assist OFF Slow Tone The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning al
323. n obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx oy ae mt AUTION must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear aon fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable so can result in the system misinterpreting a close to recognize every obstacle including small ob object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in tected or not detected at all Obstacles located the instrument cluster above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Alwa
324. n per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 10 6 V7 V8 V9 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 040506040 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows NOTE For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set before performing the manual compass calibration The variance should be set for the
325. n activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature
326. n energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver include Auto matic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints
327. n what Wes originally equipped on safety handling and ride of your vehicle your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read Replacing original tires with tires of a different size a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use 185 only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard against damage e Install on Rear Tires Only e Due to limited clearance use SAE class S low profile cables or traction devices only Security Chain Com pan
328. nate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated The mirror is twisted on the windshield button counterclockwise and requires no tools for mounting x Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 030434774 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic d
329. nctionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Coolant low Oil change due Dealer Info Key in ignition Lights on Key in Ignition Lights On Ignition or Accessory On ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Ignition or Accessory On Lights On Oil temp high Speed may be limited Oil temp high Speed limited Turn signal on Park assist on Warning object detected Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote start active Push Start Button Remote start active Insert Key and Turn to Run Memory 1 profile set Memory 2 profile set Memory system unavailable Not in Park Memory system unavailable Seatbelt buckled Memory 1 profile recall Memory 2 profile recall Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Park Assist Disabled Automatic high beams on Automatic high beams off Service All Wheel Drive System 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss All Wheel Drive System in neutral ECO Fuel Saver Indicator To Tow Vehicle
330. nd a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 AB AEN 82 9 66 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 SAU IU Ge dn 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is
331. nd folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate a
332. nder the tools and roll the tools in the bag underneath the others Use the Velcro straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug wrench on the forward side of the jack Expand the jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight to Jack And Tool Kit prevent rattles 060635166 14 Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo area Roll up and store the Jack Tool Kit and Tire Changing Instructions Reinstall the cover for the jack in the rear storage bin EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in osoeasie7 another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jumpestarting can be dangerous if done improperly 6 so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Jack And Tool Kit Properly Stored 15 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire jack NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack and tool kit follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a sys
333. ndicator Light If Equipped damage to the engine control system It also could amp The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is ON RUN position It should go out with the required engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
334. ne and transmission over Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment heating take the following actions should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving WARNING Reduce speed Do not add a snow plow winches or any other Air Conditioning aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle Turn off temporarily This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured mEmEEE XXXX U uuygJ STARTING AND OPERATING 439 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Two Wheel Drive All Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Pes PANIS e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly T Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED T Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK 440 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreationa
335. ne oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components wi
336. ng procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate normally Only second gear 3 6L engine or third gear 5 7L engine will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans NOTE mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the Huid parially draining Hora tne tur
337. ng those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could j
338. nol vapors are extremely flammable and could netueling cause serious personal injury Never have any smok you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov a period of at least 5 minutes ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up Fuel Requirements NOTE Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of you may experience hard starting and rough idle these two For best results a refueling pattern that following start up even if the above recommendations alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be are followed avoided ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engi
339. not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur ACC Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume functi
340. nspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary ITE 4 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E change if using your vehicle for police damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary D taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer U towing E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN gt 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engin
341. ntinued Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The Cruise Control system has two control modes Adapti i mode f intaini Youshioultewitdcolt Wie ACC syste e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an RAD appropriate distance between vehicles e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising i e in highway construction zones at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles downhill slopes Always be aware of the mode selected When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed
342. ny qt Reda d Rcs Ay Ee Paint Damage stasi iege da eee eee Panic Alarm 6 ee Park Sense System Rear 00005 Parking Brake ies eee as Personal Settings llle Pets susp eee Cede ed Sake EQ NE Rp a Pets Transporting 5 eee ee eee Phone Cellular eese Phone Hands Free Uconnect 566 INDEX eae Placard Tire and Loading Information 383 Polishing and Waxing 050 507 Power Door LOCKS ng acic sage ae ans emae ES 34 Inverter usce eee thiet eese oem vd dette t 220 Lit Gate uen d Oe Gas hae ese 46 MINOS 5s eg by Re Eee ede ete e 109 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 216 DEAS Em 120 122 Steering eae deri serii ee ea 362 364 SunroOf sssedlbe9ecigesesdi Referer 212 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 160 MIndOWS ceres e ge Re Res udis 42 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 67 Preparation for Jacking 00 455 Pretensioners Seat Belts Lease wetness aerate qd 61 Programmable Electronic Features 274 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 24 Quadra Trac etmen goaa nE ene Nosa RE 350 Radial Ply Dres o iu suec ee cerae nna 390 Radio Operation ke y Res 319 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 315 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 158 Rear Air Conditioning ills 326 Rear Axle Differential 0 501 Re
343. o feature the message Remote Start Active Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the door lock knob to manually lock or unlock the doors If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021833886 Manual Door Lock Knob 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle alw
344. o Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go pres
345. o untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment canno
346. ollowing Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing L 0 O O O O L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541 PE t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to prope
347. on UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a g
348. on When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If
349. on To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with passive entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which passive entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With passive entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening You have to touch a passenger passive entry equipped door handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the SELECT 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME button a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has bee
350. on by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer e Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to
351. on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031434069 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rota
352. on where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition there are top tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 022633892 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback Tether St ee WARNING Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the child seat child seat adjusters on
353. onal towing Recreational Towing All Wheel Drive Models Before recreational towing perform the procedure Two Speed Transfer Case outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL CAUTION Otherwise internal damage will result e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing 442 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shifting Into Neutral CAUTION Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position 2 Turn OFF the engine the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to in
354. ong periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Power Inverter ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter Yor 035005840 The power inverter switch is located on the switch bank below the Climate Controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the po
355. ongue Weight 431 WINE si ce carat een ea s e onde dod eh raga 435 Trailer Towing Guide 0 05 430 Trader Weight x42 steers ene ER ERES 430 INDEX 571 Transtet Case o cem ea Rem Sale aye aan 502 Electronically Shifted 351 Maintenance 4 334 Rare ad Pa 502 Transmission AXutomalic 532269 Revera e E Boe 343 503 Maintenance iu unctio c dob Ele de 503 SHMING oscis dsan ei dwaci dees is 342 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 27 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 000 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 206 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Tread Wear Indicators iilis 394 Turn Signals 6 nkau TEEGEE ES 248 519 521 UCI ConnectOr sse aco RR de cann ee a 308 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 119 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 572 INDEX EN Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 308 Universal Transmitter 00 206 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 57 Upholstery Care sss side ad ERR 509 Vanity MIROTS aac cane un dcr ea act 110 Variance Compass s 2 ois 2 869 4 ab ea Re ees 272 Vehicle Certification Label 422 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading 0 0 0 0 000 000 384 422 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage ss dse d eee ee n 329 517 Video Enter
356. op tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel Please note the top tether anchor ages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR
357. or providing the system fault still exists If the system fault The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale message for a minimum of five seconds when a system Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ME message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound a TIRE LOW PRES SURE message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are belo
358. or flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch The term IC before
359. or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still en STARTING AND OPERATING 401 be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been CDU Continued inflated to the v
360. osition repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23
361. ou Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The N Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when t
362. ough fourth gear the first tap to the left will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmis sion will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap to the left will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Dis Acsi Gen Alowed 1 v2 15 14 15 15 Applies to emm equipped with 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear for 3 6L engine fourth and fifth gears for 5 7L engine The transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive if the following condi tions are present e
363. oving Crossbars 037635140 Bending Pivot UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on it towards the matching letter in the side rail Be sure the the side rail crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far c into the slot as possible Once the crossbar is in place tighten both thumb screws completely m 037635141 Positioning Crossbars 037635142 Installing Crossbars 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the Stowing the Crossbars deployment of the crossbars Starting with one crossbar completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends Slide the crossbar away from the matching letter to remove it from the deployed position Repeat with the other crossbar CAUTION Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle 037635143 Deployed Crossbars UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Starting with the one crossbar bend up the pivot sup Then position the crossbar along the correct side rail ports at each end Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the matching letters on the side rail e 037635145 037635147 Crossbar Pivot Stowing Crossbars 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
364. ow Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of STARTING AND OPERATING 403 five seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will sound If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE e If your vehicl
365. ow to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 lbs px Occupant 3 160 lbs HE 100 Ibs HE EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them
366. ped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using a push button on the control unit and a comfort tem perature setting by using the temperature up and down buttons e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The AIC system automatically maintains the interior 1 A C Button comfort level desired by the driver and passenger Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminat hen A C is ON 1O 2 5 6 D 1O Ka m this T EE ee ATC to Switch E yas into manual mode i y y 1h lt 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the l indicator illuminates when ON 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 5 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 6 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This displ
367. pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON RUN position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant
368. ponding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021440013 Key Fob with Four Button RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Pane
369. power outlet there is also a power on the center stack of the instrument panel outlet located in the storage area of the center console LA Front Power Outlet Center Console Outlet 034640553 La 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area 072736476 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin Rear Power Outlet EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or l
370. ppear if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 10 High Beam Indicator E This light indicates that the headlights are on high 777 beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 11 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Red Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell tales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 12 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC DisplaylOdometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
371. ptive Cruise Control Ready 56789 mi a AME 032433097 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden NE 83 F ACC ACC 55 mph tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using fe Cc oA it 56789 mi To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the A Giu SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal Driver Override 032435494 Driver Override To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL
372. que au dun e i the transmission This condition is normal and will not transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles L6 to 48 km of driving cause damage to the transmission The torque con Because the engine speed is higher when the torque verter will refill within five seconds after starting the converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the TOES transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold ALL WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive Single Speed Operating Instructions Precautions gear positions will demonstrate that the transmission 3 6L Engine If Equipped is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For vehicles This system contains a single speed HI range only with 5 7L engines which have two Overdrive gears transfer case which provides convenient full time all the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake gear normal fifth gear until the transmission fluid Traction Control BTC System which combines standard and engine coolant are warm ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction STARTING AND OPERATING 351 NOTE This system is not appropriate for conditions where LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road
373. quirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON AWD AUTOSLOW RANGE NOTE When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the AWD control switch to t
374. r They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect y
375. r asi aaner eana iar 225 Hight orrara aai E E d it S 226 Luggage Carrier i es 230 Cargo Light iu see eee e eer ws 226 Cargo Tie DOWNS ceres cases Shae ete Pea eee 227 Cellular Phone lesen 119 319 Center High Mounted Stop Light 523 Certification Label llle 422 Chains Tite 44 icd au 3 RA EAS 397 Changing A Flat Tire 00040 449 Chart lire SINE cere RR Re eg 379 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 262 478 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 96 Checks Safely ius ee dau eu eed ish aa Rs 96 Child Restraint 0000 82 83 88 90 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 86 88 Child Safety Locks es es e mee 36 Clean Air Gasoline llle 411 Climate Control sa ssa sae dam Rem ae ers 319 COCK ge ouais e dorsi uin Sik eh alee ec ahead 285 294 Cold Weather Operation 00 339 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 318 Compact Spare Tire 22e wr ware as 391 COMPASS i soe eno e abe he iei dere nena 271 Compass Calibration cse ssc misto sesi rinsi 273 Compass Variance 6 ee eee 272 Computer Trip Travel 0000 269 Connector UGI tomaaesed eem hx bog eae oat dente 308 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 308 Conserving Fuel 1 0 2 eee eee 268 Console Overhead 0000000 ee eee 204 ContracL Service iili hag bahay oe Ses 547 Cooling System 494
376. r Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 e Preset 2 Artists device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is e Preset 5 Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre l
377. r N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalyt
378. r any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens CAUTION Turning ParkView On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only 1 Press the meti hant key be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key drive path 3 Press the camera setup soft key Continued 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting the enable rear camera in reverse soft key and pressing the save soft key Turning ParkView On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped 033333450 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility mi L a La 031433150 Front Map Reading Light
379. r outboard seating positions have lower anchorages capable of accommodating LATCH anchors can be are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The vehicle s seat belt must be used for the center position Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushi
380. ransmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting Shift Lever Gear Ranges 344 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued WARNING Continued e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
381. rd gear the trans mission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear that can be attained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed e If you push and hold not tap the shift lever to the right the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read D 3 6L Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the dis play will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into third gear 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with the 5 7L engine use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional under drive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear When in the DRIVE position in first thr
382. rds This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator chan
383. re ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs pedal visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifitis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70
384. re Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar REAR 3 REAR SPARE P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location 304 STARTING AND OPERATING EE This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The com
385. reaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info Uconnect Multimedia SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio Uconnect studio SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video chan nels for family entertainment directly from its satellites and broadcast
386. rify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030434072 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 BSM Warning Light The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points Side Rear Front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the v
387. rly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle s 2o See oo Soot ees ema a wos 545 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 547 Prepare For The Appointment 545 dervice Contract vise eee sod RR dad 547 Prepare A List 0 000000 545 W Warranty Information 548 Be Reasonable With Requests 545 W MOPAR Parts essere 548 H If You Need Assistance 000 545 W Reporting Safety Defects 548 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 546 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 546 a ee Ini Mexico Contact ee Bs ee ee 546 in ANACAN inchs y Faisaien paa seh 544 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades sess acess aitan me eee 551 Quality Grades 3 ex e ERR al ae 551 Treadwe ar sc 4 4 4 easels ipic wee Y 551 Temperature Grades 00 552 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 545 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For Th
388. rmation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 547 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf
389. rn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Cycle the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Fuel Economy Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped This feature shows the average fuel economy since the last reset To reset the average fuel economy display press and release the SELECT button once w
390. rovided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side N 022640121 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim WARNING Continued but they will open during air bag deployment e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during between you and the side air bags the perfor deployment could cause you to be severely injured or mance could be adversely affected and or objects killed could be pushed into you causing serious injury The system includes side impact sensors that are cali If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during do not have any accessory items installed which impacts that require side air bag occupant protection will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason
391. rtain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floo
392. rting voltage es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro car
393. ry is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx How To Use Remote Start e System not disabled from previous remote start event All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed WARNING e Hood closed e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Hazard switch off bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious e Vehicle theft alarm not active e Ignition in Off state for Keyless Enter N Go vehicle Liftgate Flipper Glass closed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters Ignition key removed from ignition switch away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death
394. s poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact
395. s To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Sunglass Bin Door Atthe front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels 034033576 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standa
396. s are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 If the engine is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder located next to the shifter on the center console 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the bottom of the cupholder Shift Lever Override Access Cover 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Using the screwdriver or similar tool reach into the opening and press and hold the shift lever override down WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469 7 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and rubber liner TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled ve
397. s disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi S mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A lar
398. s the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper
399. scoping Steering Column Multifunction Lever 000 154 Pi EIQ DES Sage antennas dase siete zen Tum Signals sse jpg Bibieatedipteenng Nee M EUDE discas in Lane Change Assist sese 154 li Electronic Speed Control 163 Flash To Pass o Rd 154 TO AcHVate aos a p esce asa es 164 104 To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To Activate To Set A Desired ACC Speed To Cancel To Turn Off 164 171 To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting Setting The Following Distance In ACC Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu Display Warnings And Maintenance Precautions While Driving With ACC General Information Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode Forward Collision Warning If Equipped arksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped Parksense Sensors Parksense Warning Display Parksense Display UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 173 175 177 179 182 186 186 188 193 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Enabling And Disabling Parksense Service The
400. se and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the
401. se 18 Sentry Key Programming sess 20 Sentry Key Replacement 19 Service Assistance ciie paii b i Ei 545 Service Contract sis ee naie a PR 547 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lessen 245 Service Manuals 0 0 0 0 ees 549 setting the Clock sponset eem 285 294 Settings Personal 0 6 0 eee eee 274 Shift Lever Override secs see ERR 468 Shifting cesc seek 9 n ERR 342 Automatic Transmission lise 342 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N icr RR 442 en INDEX 569 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 444 Shoulder Belts 222 2 oss ei mn 52 Side Aitbag aede tese we wpe whee uo 76 Signals TUM is sinere 100 248 519 521 Sirius Backseat TV Uconnect studios 315 SmartBeams leen 148 Snow Chains Tire Chains 397 Snow P OW 14 quts Pet RR he Ae UR OU 438 SHOW Ties aces sduyaeean eae sa e REG ERES 398 Spare Dre s2d60cecek ed dagdeeedetes 391 393 451 Specifications Fuel Gasoline oors 0 2 0 0 00 eee eee 410 UE MT 482 Speed Control Cruise Control 163 166 Speedometer 5023 eese 4s 249 Olan ONE xs okt aaa twat nan E 29 336 Automatic Transmission 336 Cold Weather lees 339 341 Engine Block Heater 0 341 Engine Fails to Start
402. se burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 82 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 032209541 1 ON OFF 4 CANCEL 2 RES 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster t
403. seb dece e re e Yes 388 Chains 4520 dese at Beg ak Reemi dee 397 Changing aede ace te Ce eg 449 Compact Spare 05 cages quiets ere RES 391 General Information 0 4 387 High Speed sc a eset ws vd Gin Ra ws ed a 390 Inflation Pressures 000004 388 Jaki 3 s id redo RR n RT 449 Life of Tires 22 1529 hm i Pires 395 Load Capacity 0 000000 0 383 384 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 399 Pressure Warning Light 244 Quality Grading 005 551 Radial sessi 9 ea erar das 390 Replacement soassa ayt a aih aE 395 Rotation 56 ua does eb n de e 398 Dally renes qd tae thea HS hea wes 378 SIZES ee gna da date swags eg eg Rd aes 379 SNOW Ji1t68 ic cac Gad ware aie ace ie ace 398 Spare lire 2 0 nes e ye peace aias 451 SPINNING p areca kd eR d REUS RR rd 394 Tread Wear Indicators 394 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 431 Torque Converter Clutch 0 349 Tow Hooks Emergency sess 467 TOWING dati te xe oes tee id eae 424 469 Disabled Vehicle 2 469 Guide siege pe eye eb RS 430 Recreational 2 bis a RES Yves 439 Weight ca ecce ette GainGokeae Taia 430 Traction Control illie 368 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 0 373 Trailer Towing 1 0 6 2 424 Cooling System Tips 0004 438 Hitches sc paauia oe ape RET PAR 429 Minimum Requirements 432 Trailer and T
404. sed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power element must be used outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as to the battery and powered at all times this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Im NOTE proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not fi is overed by your warranty e All accessories connected to the battery powered aie P eL outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front
405. senger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your veh
406. shbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e
407. should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always make sure that floor mats are properly e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor m
408. should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your WARNING Continued vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the a side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument between you and the door panel during
409. showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has
410. sition for towing EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471 CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not in the LOCK position Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Rear Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther th
411. speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light
412. ss ex REG xa 75 76 81 98 250 Ana Lock ese fan hera oo oe ORE Aes 247 Automatic Headlights 147 Back Up aeree RIEN the 521 Brake Assist Warning 0 377 Brake Watning vm e Ree 250 Bulb Replacement 205 518 CatpO same kee ee E ERR RES 226 Center Mounted Stop lille 523 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 262 Daytime Running 0000 005 149 Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 377 EXteflOE secca nake aara Ee e dore bk kos 100 FOG A 248 520 Fuses fo 34 6 cia ga stg Gale daa aeo ta 511 Hazard Warning Flasher 448 Headlights esses 518 519 Headlights On With Wipers 147 High Beam Indicator 004 248 Illuminated Entry 200 23 Low Fuel 2 es n ee en 263 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 245 Map Reading 0 0000 eee 152 R ading voce aia eas sere So EA 152 204 Rear Servicing uccueeeacc See Ae er 521 Rear Tail 423 iem REOR es 521 en INDEX 563 Seat Belt Reminder 252 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 250 SetVIC 4 4 403 8446 349608444 edd 518 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 245 Side Marker 0 0 00 eee eee 521 SmartBeams srl 148 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 244 Traction Control oscar due 377 Tur Signal w
413. st be replaced The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can maintain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key fob removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the syst
414. standing Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Park Sense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled The ParkSense system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above in the Instrument Cluster s EVIC provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and the rear f
415. surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached 037635136 1 Side Rail 2 Crossbar ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity Deploying the Crossbars Starting with one crossbar completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar NOTE The thumb screws cannot be fully removed Thumb Screw 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m CAUTION Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding the crossbar towards the center of the roof Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent F damage to the vehicle Starting with one crossbar bend down the pivot supports at each end In 037635139 Rem
416. suspension and exhaust system for damage e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 362 STARTING AND OPERATING EE e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces
417. system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle e ges capal ating LAT compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments and child seats with fixed lower attachments The rear seat lower The rea
418. t antifreeze is not recommended 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will
419. t attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer
420. t be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact d 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 CAUTION All occupants including the driver s
421. t make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compres sion drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering
422. t seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matt
423. t sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary ood Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km LJ Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 mil
424. t tight if necessary In the rear center seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tight ened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing 1 gt 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 strap anchorages behind the re
425. tainment System Rear Seat Video System 00 0 315 Viscosity Engine Oil pensosu innur eee 483 Voice Recognition System VR 120 Warning Flasher Hazard 448 Warning Roll Over is cene E RR at ius 5 Warnings and Cautions 00004 8 Warranty Information sbec dean kemer eaa i s 548 Washers Windshield 155 490 Washing Vehicle kk ERREUR 507 Waxing and Polishing 000 507 Wheel and Wheel Trim i peseta casata draaie 509 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 509 Wind Buffeting 000 0000 45 215 Window Fogging lt geesten iE one ee eee 328 Windows i e Rem be sateni 42 ROWED zeit e dose BS d dot eua ed 42 Windshield Defroster 0 000000 98 Windshield Washers 000000000000 155 Fluid oa sesion aa nas 490 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 488 Windshield Wipers 0 0 2 0 0000 cae 155 Wipers Intermittent 005 156 Wipers Rain Sensitive sese sea ea y yea 158 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as c
426. take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ELECE GIE De 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE
427. te Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed with the overhead console switch Also the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the liftgate switch located on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing once will close the liftgate only This button cannot be used to open the liftgate To operate the power liftgate manually in the open direction pull the liftgate handle once to initiate power cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put liftgate into manual mode When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further information refer to Customer Programmable Features System Setup Electronic Vehicle information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel NOTE In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away
428. tem voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Tm s Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap ger s front seat There are remote locations located under _2 Remote Negative Post the hood to assist in jump starting EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 WARNING 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Jump Starting Procedure Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish
429. ternal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Shift the trans mission into PARK disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 3 For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go remove the Keyless Enter N Go button and use the key fob to complete this procedure Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the brake pedal E STARTING AND OPERATING 443 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light 7 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button Seye On selene ae NEUTRAL Prisons located by the selector switch The NEUTRAL indicator 9 Start the engine light will blink while the shift is in progress The light DONT will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to Te Pep e PTa RENEE NEUTRAL is complete 11 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 12 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE 13 Turn OFF the engine 5 14 Firmly apply the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into PARK 051940521 NEUTRAL Switch 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Damage to the
430. th a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide sta
431. th non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 419 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler the headlamp switch Fuel Filler Door Release Switch Fuel Filler Cap 056810679 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula t
432. the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may
433. the larger of the latches to access the 935209531 lower storage compartment Storage Compartment To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on the small latch located on the lid UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Press in on the flashlight to release it Lower Storage Compartment CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of Press And Release the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light L qui N y ym p p mm E p pu po gza 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high Cargo Storage twice for low and a third time to return to off 035410217 Three Press Switch There is a removable storage bin located on the left side of the rear cargo area Additional storage can be found in the load floor To access the lower storage lift the handle and raise the storage lid Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert
434. the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the discharged vehicle 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING e Chain
435. the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in WARNING place WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or acci strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle deni a houk could pull loose and allow the ciila seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Cargo Tie Down Hooks The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se
436. the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmis sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis sion cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation 348 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW
437. the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Requirements Tires Do no
438. ther informa tion ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on the driver s side should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the then pull the key out with your other hand OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your
439. ting the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 3 uU 031434070 Dimmer Control 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Ambient Light side of the console These buttons are backlit for night The overhead console is equipped with an
440. tioning Rear Zone 326 Air Filter iue ee PM Oe eR RES 484 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 0 0c eee ene 388 Airbag wo via cee se De bee oe cae eee eS 67 77 Airbag Deployment 00000000 78 Airbag Light 00 75 76 81 98 250 Airbag Maintenance 0 0000 e ues 80 Airbag Sid 2 ne 71 74 76 77 Airbag Window Side Curtain 72 74 77 Alarm Security Alarm 20 250 Alarm Panie 4 259 dee a ae a ER Rw ares 26 All Wheel Drive AWD eese 350 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 305 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 368 Anti Lock Warning Light 247 Anti Theft System sead esee e acere 250 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 524 Appearance Care 6 eee ee 506 Assist Hill Start ax Gidea ui dace eee Geta e 374 Auto Down Power Windows 43 Automatic Dimming Mirror 108 Automatic Door Locks 00 0000 eee 35 Automatic Headlights 04 147 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 319 Automatic Transmission s s 343 503 Adding Fluid 000004 506 Fluid and Filter Changes 503 Fluid Level Check 04 504 505 Fluid Type eread sas de wale eee Peaks 503 ne INDEX 555 Special Additives 0000 504 Torque Convert t pases saets anes
441. tivation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead BRAKE 23456 mi e Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 032435496 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ing wheel repeatedly until one of the follow iE Press the MENU button located on the steer ACC SET E ing displays in the EVIC When ACC is set the set speed will display Menu The set speed will continue to display in place of the Button odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read NE 83 F Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready WMUZ
442. to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 358 STARTING AND OPERATING EE ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 CAUTI
443. to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor S Jor Goan Defrost W as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 41352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures lesse 336 Automatic Transmission 336 Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped 337 Normal Starting t dras kedas 338 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 2 008 339 If Engine Fails To Start suu 340 After Starting ise 341 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 341 Bl Automatic Transmission 00 Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Five Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges ino eR tak Re Saw Bi All Wheel Drive Operation Single Speed Operating Instructions Precautions 3 6L Engine If Equipped 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Three Position Switch 5 7L Engine If Equipped ll On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips Shifting Procedure When To Use Low Range If Equipped 358 Driving Through Water
444. transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 16 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 17 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 18 Release the parking brake NOTE e Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Shifting Out Of Neutral Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake STARTING AND OPERATING 445 3 Insert the key fob into the ignition switc
445. tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for a 406 STARTING AND OPERATING EE minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 77t E Tire Pressure 33 33 33 33 PSI Omi RUN 055838588 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure
446. um speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of collision The driver has the responsi bility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warn ing could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the EVIC FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This gives you the most reaction time setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Forward Hlert Timing Forward Hlert OFF Timing Near OFF JF ar m n i REP m g P Example Onl
447. ur Immediate service is p d y that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly mm required installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap drive slowly or park over flammable substances such may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator see This light will turn on to indicate the wind we shield washer fluid is low e SERV AWD The SERV AWD light monitors the electric shift AWD system If the SERV AWD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include s e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or a more doors may be ajar e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that l
448. value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received STARTING AND OPERATING 407 NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present and a pressure value will be in PSI kPa or BAR displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following i E H 77 F 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to Tire Pressure facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 33 33 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals lt 33 PSI 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Omi RUN 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 055838856 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat ay Using wheely ties mox eguppedwith LPM seng
449. ve seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to
450. ven if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Forward Collision Warning The Forward Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection scroll up or down until the pre ferred
451. w the low pressure warning thresh old If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will General Information sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM following conditions SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tir
452. ways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e f the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 WARNING WARNING Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Co
453. weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size mm stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package includes both a seven pin and a brakes when you need them and could have a four pin connector at the rear of the vehicle collision Continued 436 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector pr Refer to the following illustrations 7 Dr ON ede I ME ee 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Four Pin Connector 4 Electric Brakes 1 Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn
454. wer outlet off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the fold down center armrest located in the center console E e 0351 33143 SL Front Cupholder Location Rear Cupholders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 STORAGE Door Storage Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035209525 Door Panel Storage Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment pull outward on the latch and lower the glove box door 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Center Console The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area 035209532 irm Storage Compartment Latches Lift upward on
455. without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the slow or fast mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active ther
456. wner s manual The SERV AWD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift all wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the all wheel drive system is not functioning prop erly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV AWD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components 354 STARTING AND OPERATING EE When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE the engine speed is approximately three times that of the AWD AUTO position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of all wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because all wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengag
457. wo halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the push forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to button located at the base of the head restraint and push the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the downward on the head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 4m 030907490 Push Button 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head R
458. women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRB
459. ws the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood cautions do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off service the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location WARNING Continued The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the
460. ximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than e If you use a trailer brake controller with your 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas when pulling a trailer ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill
461. y 032435759 Example Only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you WMUZ The Light Forward Hlert The Afters Timing He Lives Hear gt Far 56789 mi 032033147 FCW Off Example FCW NOTE OFF P 032035785 The system will retain the last setting selected by the Example Only driver after ignition shut down NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed in the EVIC 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it in
462. y SCC Super Z6 SZ 441 cables or equivalent are recommended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good con dition are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Re move the damaged parts of the device before further use Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment e Observe the traction device manufacturer s in structions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent
463. y Green M5 25 Amp 115V AC Power In M13 20 Amp Instrument Cluster Natural verter Yellow M6 20 Amp Rain Sensor Cigar M14 20 Amp Back Up Camera Yellow _ Lighter Yellow M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 M15 20 Amp Power Seat Yellow Switchable Yellow Module s Adaptive M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat amp Cruise Control Audio Yellow Steering Wheel Telematics Daytime M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats ugnne Dies Allow Relay Air Suspension Module Instrument M10 15 Amp Video Universal Ga Cluster Blue rage Door Opener ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M26 10 Amp Driver Door Switch Red Controller Red Bank M19 25 Amp Automatic Shutdown M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Natural 1 and 2 Red Wireless Control M20 15 Amp Instrument Cluster Module Keyless En Blue try Module M21 20 Amp Automatic Shutdown M28 15 Amp Powertrain Yellow 3 Blue Controller M22 10 Amp Horns Low High ee Control Red Right z M23 10 Amp Horns Low High M29 E Tire Pressure Monitor Red Left s M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper M30 mun J1962 Diag Connector Natural dats M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor M31 a E Backup Lamps Yellow Output Diesel Lift EE Pump Export Only 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
464. y in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the heater cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is located e 3 6L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or
465. y its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equip
466. y result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e With Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in OFE At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following con
467. ys check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of th
468. zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map For further information refer to Compass Vari ance 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa o

2011 Durango Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents